xref: /openbmc/linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision 7a2eb736)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  *
320  */
321 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
322 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
323 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
324 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
351 
352 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
353 };
354 
355 /*
356  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
357  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
358  * filtering will be disabled.
359  */
360 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
361 
362 /**
363  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
364  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
365  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
366  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
367  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
368  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
369  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
370  */
371 enum ieee80211_event_type {
372 	RSSI_EVENT,
373 	MLME_EVENT,
374 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
375 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
376 };
377 
378 /**
379  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
380  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
381  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
382  */
383 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
384 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
385 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
386 };
387 
388 /**
389  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
390  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
391  */
392 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
393 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
394 };
395 
396 /**
397  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
398  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
399  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
400  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
401  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
402  */
403 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
404 	AUTH_EVENT,
405 	ASSOC_EVENT,
406 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
407 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
408 };
409 
410 /**
411  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
412  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
413  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
414  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
415  */
416 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
417 	MLME_SUCCESS,
418 	MLME_DENIED,
419 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
420 };
421 
422 /**
423  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
424  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
425  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
426  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
427  */
428 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
429 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
430 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
431 	u16 reason;
432 };
433 
434 /**
435  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
436  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
437  * @tid: the tid
438  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
439  */
440 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
441 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
442 	u16 tid;
443 	u16 ssn;
444 };
445 
446 /**
447  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
448  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
449  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
450  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
451  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
452  * @u:union holding the fields above
453  */
454 struct ieee80211_event {
455 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
456 	union {
457 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
458 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
459 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
460 	} u;
461 };
462 
463 /**
464  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
465  *
466  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
467  *
468  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
469  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
470  */
471 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
472 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
473 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
474 };
475 
476 /**
477  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
478  *
479  * @lci: LCI subelement content
480  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
481  * @lci_len: LCI data length
482  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
483  */
484 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
485 	const u8 *lci;
486 	const u8 *civicloc;
487 	size_t lci_len;
488 	size_t civicloc_len;
489 };
490 
491 /**
492  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
493  *
494  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
495  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
496  *
497  * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
498  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
499  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
500  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
501  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
502  *	ACK, BACK or both
503  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
504  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
505  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
506  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
507  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
508  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
509  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
510  * @assoc: association status
511  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
512  *	or not
513  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
514  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
515  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
516  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
517  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
518  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
519  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
520  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
521  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
522  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
523  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
524  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
525  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
526  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
527  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
528  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
529  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
530  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
531  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
532  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
533  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
534  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
535  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
536  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
537  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
538  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
539  *	the current band.
540  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
541  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
542  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
543  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
544  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
545  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
546  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
547  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
548  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
549  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
550  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
551  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
552  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
553  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
554  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
555  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
556  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
557  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
558  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
559  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
560  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
561  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
562  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
563  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
564  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
565  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
566  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
567  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
568  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
569  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
570  *	your driver/device needs to do.
571  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
572  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
573  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
574  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
575  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
576  * @txpower: TX power in dBm
577  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
578  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
579  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
580  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
581  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
582  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
583  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
584  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
585  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
586  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
587  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
588  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
589  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
590  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
591  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
592  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
593  *	station.
594  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
595  *	responder functionality.
596  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
597  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
598  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
599  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
600  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
601  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
602  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
603  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
604  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
605  * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
606  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
607  */
608 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
609 	const u8 *bssid;
610 	u8 bss_color;
611 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
612 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
613 	bool uora_exists;
614 	bool ack_enabled;
615 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
616 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
617 	bool he_support;
618 	bool twt_requester;
619 	bool twt_responder;
620 	/* association related data */
621 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
622 	bool ibss_creator;
623 	u16 aid;
624 	/* erp related data */
625 	bool use_cts_prot;
626 	bool use_short_preamble;
627 	bool use_short_slot;
628 	bool enable_beacon;
629 	u8 dtim_period;
630 	u16 beacon_int;
631 	u16 assoc_capability;
632 	u64 sync_tsf;
633 	u32 sync_device_ts;
634 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
635 	u32 basic_rates;
636 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
637 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
638 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
639 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
640 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
641 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
642 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
643 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
644 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
645 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
646 	int arp_addr_cnt;
647 	bool qos;
648 	bool idle;
649 	bool ps;
650 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
651 	size_t ssid_len;
652 	bool hidden_ssid;
653 	int txpower;
654 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
655 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
656 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
657 	u16 max_idle_period;
658 	bool protected_keep_alive;
659 	bool ftm_responder;
660 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
661 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
662 	bool nontransmitted;
663 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
664 	u8 bssid_index;
665 	u8 bssid_indicator;
666 	bool ema_ap;
667 	u8 profile_periodicity;
668 	struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
669 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
670 };
671 
672 /**
673  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
674  *
675  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
676  *
677  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
678  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
679  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
680  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
681  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
682  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
683  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
684  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
685  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
686  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
687  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
688  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
689  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
690  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
691  *	station
692  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
693  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
694  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
695  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
696  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
697  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
698  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
699  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
700  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
701  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
702  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
703  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
704  *	hardware queue.
705  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
706  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
707  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
708  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
709  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
711  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
712  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
713  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
714  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
715  *	off-channel operation.
716  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
717  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
718  *	it can be sent out.
719  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
720  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
721  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
722  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
724  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
725  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
726  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
727  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
728  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
729  *	queue gets full.
730  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
731  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
732  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
733  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
734  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
735  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
736  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
737  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
738  *	status to user space)
739  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
740  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
741  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
742  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
743  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
744  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
745  *	handled properly by the device.
746  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
747  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
748  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
750  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
751  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
752  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
753  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
754  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
755  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
756  *	PS-Poll responses.
757  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
758  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
759  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
760  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
761  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
762  *	monitor injection).
763  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
764  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
765  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
766  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
767  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
768  *
769  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
770  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
771  */
772 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
773 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
774 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
775 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
776 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
777 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
778 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
779 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
780 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
781 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
782 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
783 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
784 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
785 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
786 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
787 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
788 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
789 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
790 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
791 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
792 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
793 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
794 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
795 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
796 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
797 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
798 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
799 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
801 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
804 };
805 
806 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
807 
808 /**
809  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
810  *
811  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
812  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
813  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
814  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
815  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
816  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
818  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
819  *
820  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
821  */
822 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
823 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
829 };
830 
831 /*
832  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
833  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
834  */
835 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
837 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
838 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
839 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
840 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
841 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
842 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
843 
844 /**
845  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
846  *	Rate Control algorithm.
847  *
848  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
849  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
850  *
851  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
852  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
853  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
854  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
855  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
856  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
857  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
859  *	Greenfield mode.
860  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
862  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
863  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
864  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
865  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
866  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
867  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
868  */
869 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
870 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
871 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
872 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
873 
874 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
875 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
876 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
877 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
878 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
879 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
880 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
881 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
882 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
883 };
884 
885 
886 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
887 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
888 
889 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
891 
892 /* maximum number of rate stages */
893 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
894 
895 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
896 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
897 
898 /**
899  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
900  *
901  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
902  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
903  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
904  *
905  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
906  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
907  *
908  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
909  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
910  *
911  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
912  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
913  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
914  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
915  * information::
916  *
917  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
918  *
919  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
920  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
921  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
922  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
923  * information should then contain::
924  *
925  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
926  *
927  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
928  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
929  */
930 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
931 	s8 idx;
932 	u16 count:5,
933 	    flags:11;
934 } __packed;
935 
936 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
937 
938 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
939 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
940 {
941 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
942 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
943 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
944 }
945 
946 static inline u8
947 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
948 {
949 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
950 }
951 
952 static inline u8
953 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
954 {
955 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
956 }
957 
958 /**
959  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
960  *
961  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
962  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
963  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
964  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
965  *
966  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
967  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
968  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
969  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
970  * @control: union part for control data
971  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
972  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
973  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
974  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
975  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
976  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
977  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
978  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
979  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
980  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
981  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
982  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
983  * @pad: padding
984  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
985  * @status: union part for status data
986  * @status.rates: attempted rates
987  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
988  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
989  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
990  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
991  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
992  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
993  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
994  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
995  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
996  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
997  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
998  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
999  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1000  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1001  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1002  */
1003 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1004 	/* common information */
1005 	u32 flags;
1006 	u8 band;
1007 
1008 	u8 hw_queue;
1009 
1010 	u16 ack_frame_id;
1011 
1012 	union {
1013 		struct {
1014 			union {
1015 				/* rate control */
1016 				struct {
1017 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1018 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1019 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1020 					u8 use_rts:1;
1021 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1022 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1023 					u8 skip_table:1;
1024 					/* 2 bytes free */
1025 				};
1026 				/* only needed before rate control */
1027 				unsigned long jiffies;
1028 			};
1029 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1030 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1031 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1032 			u32 flags;
1033 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1034 		} control;
1035 		struct {
1036 			u64 cookie;
1037 		} ack;
1038 		struct {
1039 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1040 			s32 ack_signal;
1041 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1042 			u8 ampdu_len;
1043 			u8 antenna;
1044 			u16 tx_time;
1045 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1046 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1047 		} status;
1048 		struct {
1049 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1050 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1051 			u8 pad[4];
1052 
1053 			void *rate_driver_data[
1054 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1055 		};
1056 		void *driver_data[
1057 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1058 	};
1059 };
1060 
1061 /**
1062  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1063  *
1064  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1065  * @info: Basic tx status information
1066  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1067  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1068  */
1069 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1070 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1071 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1072 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1073 	struct rate_info *rate;
1074 };
1075 
1076 /**
1077  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1078  *
1079  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1080  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1081  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1082  *
1083  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1084  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1085  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1086  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1087  */
1088 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1089 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1090 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1091 	const u8 *common_ies;
1092 	size_t common_ie_len;
1093 };
1094 
1095 
1096 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1097 {
1098 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1099 }
1100 
1101 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1102 {
1103 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1104 }
1105 
1106 /**
1107  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1108  *
1109  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1110  *
1111  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1112  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1113  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1114  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1115  *
1116  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1117  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1118  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1119  */
1120 static inline void
1121 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1122 {
1123 	int i;
1124 
1125 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1126 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1127 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1128 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1129 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1130 	/* clear the rate counts */
1131 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1132 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1133 
1134 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1135 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1136 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1137 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1138 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1139 }
1140 
1141 
1142 /**
1143  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1144  *
1145  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1146  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1147  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1148  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1149  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1150  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1151  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1152  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1153  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1154  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1155  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1156  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1157  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1158  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1159  *	de-duplication by itself.
1160  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1161  *	the frame.
1162  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1163  *	the frame.
1164  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1165  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1166  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1167  *	merging.
1168  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1169  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1170  *	(including FCS) was received.
1171  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1172  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1173  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1174  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1175  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1176  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1177  *	each A-MPDU
1178  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1179  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1180  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1181  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1182  *	on this subframe
1183  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1184  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1185  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1186  *	done by the hardware
1187  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1188  *	processing it in any regular way.
1189  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1190  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1191  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1192  *	monitor interfaces.
1193  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1194  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1195  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1196  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1197  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1198  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1199  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1200  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1201  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1202  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1203  *	interleaved with other frames.
1204  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1205  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1206  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1207  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1208  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1209  *	the first subframe.
1210  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1211  *	be done in the hardware.
1212  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1213  *	frame
1214  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1215  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1216  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1217  *
1218  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1219  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1220  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1221  *	 - DATA5_GI
1222  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1223  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1224  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1225  *
1226  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1227  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1228  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1229  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1230  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1231  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1232  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1233  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1234  */
1235 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1236 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1237 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1238 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1239 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1240 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1241 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1242 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1243 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1244 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1245 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1246 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1247 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1248 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1249 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1250 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1251 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1252 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1253 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1254 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1255 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1256 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1257 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1258 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1259 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1260 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1261 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1262 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1263 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1264 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1265 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1266 };
1267 
1268 /**
1269  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1270  *
1271  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1272  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1273  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1274  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1275  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1276  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1277  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1278  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1279  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1280  */
1281 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1282 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1283 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1284 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1285 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1286 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1287 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1288 };
1289 
1290 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1291 
1292 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1293 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1294 	RX_ENC_HT,
1295 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1296 	RX_ENC_HE,
1297 };
1298 
1299 /**
1300  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1301  *
1302  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1303  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1304  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1305  *
1306  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1307  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1308  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1309  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1310  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1311  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1312  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1313  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1314  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1315  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1316  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1317  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1318  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1319  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1320  *	values were filled.
1321  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1322  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1323  * @antenna: antenna used
1324  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1325  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1326  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1327  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1328  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1329  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1330  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1331  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1332  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1333  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1334  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1335  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1336  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1337  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1338  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1339  */
1340 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1341 	u64 mactime;
1342 	u64 boottime_ns;
1343 	u32 device_timestamp;
1344 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1345 	u32 flag;
1346 	u16 freq;
1347 	u8 enc_flags;
1348 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1349 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1350 	u8 rate_idx;
1351 	u8 nss;
1352 	u8 rx_flags;
1353 	u8 band;
1354 	u8 antenna;
1355 	s8 signal;
1356 	u8 chains;
1357 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1358 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1359 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1360 };
1361 
1362 /**
1363  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1364  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1365  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1366  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1367  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1368  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1369  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1370  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1371  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1372  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1373  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1374  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1375  *	@data field.
1376  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1377  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1378  *	length
1379  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1380  *
1381  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1382  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1383  * data.
1384  */
1385 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1386 	u32 present;
1387 	u8 align;
1388 	u8 oui[3];
1389 	u8 subns;
1390 	u8 pad;
1391 	u16 len;
1392 	u8 data[];
1393 } __packed;
1394 
1395 /**
1396  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1397  *
1398  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1399  *
1400  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1401  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1402  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1403  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1404  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1405  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1406  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1407  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1408  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1409  *	for more.
1410  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1411  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1412  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1413  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1414  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1415  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1416  *	operating channel.
1417  */
1418 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1419 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1420 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1421 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1422 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1423 };
1424 
1425 
1426 /**
1427  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1428  *
1429  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1430  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1431  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1432  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1433  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1434  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1435  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1436  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1437  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1438  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1439  */
1440 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1441 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1442 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1443 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1444 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1445 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1446 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1447 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1448 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1449 };
1450 
1451 /**
1452  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1453  *
1454  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1455  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1456  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1457  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1458  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1459  */
1460 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1461 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1462 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1463 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1464 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1465 
1466 	/* keep last */
1467 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1468 };
1469 
1470 /**
1471  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1472  *
1473  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1474  *
1475  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1476  *
1477  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1478  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1479  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1480  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1481  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1482  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1483  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1484  *
1485  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1486  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1487  *
1488  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1489  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1490  *
1491  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1492  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1493  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1494  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1495  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1496  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1497  *
1498  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1499  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1500  *	configured for an HT channel.
1501  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1502  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1503  */
1504 struct ieee80211_conf {
1505 	u32 flags;
1506 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1507 
1508 	u16 listen_interval;
1509 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1510 
1511 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1512 
1513 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1514 	bool radar_enabled;
1515 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1516 };
1517 
1518 /**
1519  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1520  *
1521  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1522  * operation.
1523  *
1524  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1525  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1526  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1527  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1528  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1529  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1530  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1531  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1532  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1533  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1534  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1535   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1536   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1537  */
1538 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1539 	u64 timestamp;
1540 	u32 device_timestamp;
1541 	bool block_tx;
1542 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1543 	u8 count;
1544 	u32 delay;
1545 };
1546 
1547 /**
1548  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1549  *
1550  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1551  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1552  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1553  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1554  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1555  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1556  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1557  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1558  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1559  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1560  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1561  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1562  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1563  */
1564 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1565 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1566 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1567 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1568 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1569 };
1570 
1571 /**
1572  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1573  *
1574  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1575  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1576  *
1577  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1578  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1579  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1580  * @addr: address of this interface
1581  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1582  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1583  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1584  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1585  *	for read access.
1586  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1587  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1588  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1589  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1590  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1591  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1592  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1593  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1594  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1595  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1596  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1597  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1598  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1599  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1600  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1601  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1602  *	interface.
1603  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1604  *	sizeof(void \*).
1605  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1606  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1607  *	protected by fq->lock.
1608  */
1609 struct ieee80211_vif {
1610 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1611 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1612 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1613 	bool p2p;
1614 	bool csa_active;
1615 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1616 
1617 	u8 cab_queue;
1618 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1619 
1620 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1621 
1622 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1623 
1624 	u32 driver_flags;
1625 
1626 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1627 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1628 #endif
1629 
1630 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1631 
1632 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1633 
1634 	/* must be last */
1635 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1636 };
1637 
1638 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1639 {
1640 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1641 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1642 #endif
1643 	return false;
1644 }
1645 
1646 /**
1647  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1648  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1649  *
1650  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1651  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1652  *
1653  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1654  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1655  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1656  */
1657 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1658 
1659 /**
1660  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1661  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1662  *
1663  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1664  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1665  *
1666  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1667  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1668  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1669  */
1670 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1671 
1672 /**
1673  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1674  *
1675  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1676  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1677  *
1678  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1679  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1680  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1681  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1682  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1683  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1684  *	generation in software.
1685  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1686  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1687  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1688  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1689  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1690  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1691  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1692  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1693  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1694  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1695  *	MIC.
1696  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1697  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1698  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1699  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1700  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1701  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1702  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1703  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1704  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1705  *	only for managment frames (MFP).
1706  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1707  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1708  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1709  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1710  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1711  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1712  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1713  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1714  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1715  *	generation only
1716  */
1717 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1718 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1719 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1720 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1721 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1722 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1723 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1724 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1725 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1726 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1727 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1728 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1729 };
1730 
1731 /**
1732  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1733  *
1734  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1735  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1736  *
1737  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1738  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1739  *	encrypted in hardware.
1740  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1741  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1742  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1743  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1744  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1745  * @keylen: key material length
1746  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1747  * 	data block:
1748  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1749  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1750  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1751  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1752  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1753  */
1754 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1755 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1756 	u32 cipher;
1757 	u8 icv_len;
1758 	u8 iv_len;
1759 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1760 	s8 keyidx;
1761 	u16 flags;
1762 	u8 keylen;
1763 	u8 key[0];
1764 };
1765 
1766 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1767 
1768 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1769 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1770 
1771 /**
1772  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1773  *
1774  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1775  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1776  *	reverse order than in packet)
1777  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1778  *	reverse order than in packet)
1779  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1780  *	reverse order than in packet)
1781  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1782  *	reverse order than in packet)
1783  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1784  */
1785 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1786 	union {
1787 		struct {
1788 			u32 iv32;
1789 			u16 iv16;
1790 		} tkip;
1791 		struct {
1792 			u8 pn[6];
1793 		} ccmp;
1794 		struct {
1795 			u8 pn[6];
1796 		} aes_cmac;
1797 		struct {
1798 			u8 pn[6];
1799 		} aes_gmac;
1800 		struct {
1801 			u8 pn[6];
1802 		} gcmp;
1803 		struct {
1804 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1805 			u8 seq_len;
1806 		} hw;
1807 	};
1808 };
1809 
1810 /**
1811  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1812  *
1813  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1814  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1815  *
1816  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1817  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1818  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1819  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1820  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1821  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1822  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1823  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1824  *     key_idx value calculation:
1825  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1826  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1827  */
1828 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1829 	u32 cipher;
1830 	u16 iftype;
1831 	u8 hdr_len;
1832 	u8 pn_len;
1833 	u8 pn_off;
1834 	u8 key_idx_off;
1835 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1836 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1837 	u8 mic_len;
1838 };
1839 
1840 /**
1841  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1842  *
1843  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1844  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1845  *
1846  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1847  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1848  */
1849 enum set_key_cmd {
1850 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1851 };
1852 
1853 /**
1854  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1855  *
1856  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1857  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1858  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1859  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1860  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1861  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1862  */
1863 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1864 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1865 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1866 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1867 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1868 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1869 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1870 };
1871 
1872 /**
1873  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1874  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1875  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1876  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1877  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1878  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1879  *
1880  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1881  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1882  */
1883 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1884 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1885 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1886 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1887 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1888 };
1889 
1890 /**
1891  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1892  *
1893  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1894  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1895  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1896  */
1897 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1898 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1899 	struct {
1900 		s8 idx;
1901 		u8 count;
1902 		u8 count_cts;
1903 		u8 count_rts;
1904 		u16 flags;
1905 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1906 };
1907 
1908 /**
1909  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1910  *
1911  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1912  *
1913  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1914  *	to the STA.
1915  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1916  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1917  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1918  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1919  *	per peer TPC.
1920  */
1921 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1922 	s16 power;
1923 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1924 };
1925 
1926 /**
1927  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1928  *
1929  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1930  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1931  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1932  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1933  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1934  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1935  *
1936  * @addr: MAC address
1937  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1938  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1939  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1940  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1941  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1942  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1943  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1944  *	Can be modified by driver.
1945  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1946  *	otherwise always false)
1947  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1948  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1949  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1950  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1951  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1952  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1953  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1954  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1955  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1956  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1957  *	the station moves to associated state.
1958  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1959  * @rates: rate control selection table
1960  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1961  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1962  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1963  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1964  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1965  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1966  *	unlimited.
1967  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1968  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1969  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1970  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1971  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1972  */
1973 struct ieee80211_sta {
1974 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1975 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1976 	u16 aid;
1977 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1978 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1979 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1980 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1981 	bool wme;
1982 	u8 uapsd_queues;
1983 	u8 max_sp;
1984 	u8 rx_nss;
1985 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1986 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1987 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1988 	bool tdls;
1989 	bool tdls_initiator;
1990 	bool mfp;
1991 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1992 
1993 	/**
1994 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
1995 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1996 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1997 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1998 	 *
1999 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2000 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2001 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2002 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2003 	 *
2004 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2005 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2006 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2007 	 */
2008 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2009 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2010 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2011 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2012 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2013 
2014 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2015 
2016 	/* must be last */
2017 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2018 };
2019 
2020 /**
2021  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2022  *
2023  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2024  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2025  *
2026  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2027  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2028  */
2029 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2030 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2031 };
2032 
2033 /**
2034  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2035  *
2036  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2037  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2038  */
2039 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2040 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2041 };
2042 
2043 /**
2044  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2045  *
2046  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2047  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2048  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2049  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2050  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2051  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2052  *
2053  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2054  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2055  */
2056 struct ieee80211_txq {
2057 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2058 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2059 	u8 tid;
2060 	u8 ac;
2061 
2062 	/* must be last */
2063 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2064 };
2065 
2066 /**
2067  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2068  *
2069  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2070  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2071  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2072  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2073  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2074  *
2075  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2076  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2077  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2078  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2079  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2080  *	algorithm.
2081  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2082  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2083  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2084  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2085  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2086  *	CCK frames.
2087  *
2088  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2089  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2090  *	the FCS at the end.
2091  *
2092  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2093  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2094  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2095  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2096  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2097  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2098  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2099  *
2100  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2101  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2102  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2103  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2104  *
2105  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2106  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2107  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2108  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2109  *
2110  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2111  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2112  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2113  *
2114  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2115  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2116  *
2117  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2118  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2119  *
2120  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2121  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2122  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2123  *
2124  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2125  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2126  *
2127  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2128  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2129  *
2130  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2131  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2132  *	the stack.
2133  *
2134  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2135  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2136  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2137  *
2138  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2139  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2140  *	dtim_period).
2141  *
2142  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2143  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2144  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2145  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2146  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2147  *	only in that case.
2148  *
2149  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2150  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2151  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2152  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2153  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2154  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2155  *
2156  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2157  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2158  *	software.
2159  *
2160  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2161  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2162  *	active interfaces.
2163  *
2164  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2165  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2166  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2167  *
2168  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2169  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2170  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2171  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2172  *	supported cipher suites.
2173  *
2174  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2175  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2176  *	for frames.
2177  *
2178  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2179  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2180  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2181  *	control for more details.
2182  *
2183  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2184  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2185  *
2186  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2187  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2188  *	is supported.
2189  *
2190  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2191  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2192  *
2193  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2194  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2195  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2196  *
2197  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2198  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2199  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2200  *	CSA frame.
2201  *
2202  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2203  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2204  *
2205  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2206  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2207  *
2208  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2209  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2210  *
2211  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2212  *	within A-MPDU.
2213  *
2214  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2215  *	for sent beacons.
2216  *
2217  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2218  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2219  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2220  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2221  *
2222  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2223  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2224  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2225  *	timeout.
2226  *
2227  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2228  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2229  *
2230  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2231  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2232  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2233  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2234  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2235  *
2236  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2237  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2238  *
2239  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2240  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2241  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2242  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2243  *
2244  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2245  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2246  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2247  *
2248  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2249  *	TDLS links.
2250  *
2251  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2252  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2253  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2254  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2255  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2256  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2257  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2258  *
2259  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2260  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2261  *
2262  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2263  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2264  *
2265  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2266  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2267  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2268  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2269  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2270  *
2271  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2272  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2273  *	TXQs to start with.
2274  *
2275  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2276  *	length in tx status information
2277  *
2278  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2279  *
2280  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2281  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2282  *
2283  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2284  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2285  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2286  *
2287  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2288  */
2289 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2290 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2291 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2292 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2293 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2294 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2295 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2296 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2297 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2298 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2299 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2300 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2301 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2302 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2303 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2304 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2305 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2306 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2307 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2308 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2309 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2310 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2311 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2312 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2313 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2314 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2315 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2316 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2317 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2318 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2319 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2320 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2321 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2322 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2323 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2324 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2325 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2326 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2327 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2328 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2329 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2330 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2331 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2332 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2333 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2334 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2335 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2336 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2337 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2338 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2339 
2340 	/* keep last, obviously */
2341 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2342 };
2343 
2344 /**
2345  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2346  *
2347  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2348  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2349  *
2350  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2351  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2352  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2353  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2354  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2355  *
2356  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2357  *
2358  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2359  *	along with this structure.
2360  *
2361  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2362  *
2363  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2364  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2365  *
2366  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2367  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2368  *
2369  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2370  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2371  *
2372  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2373  *	that HW supports
2374  *
2375  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2376  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2377  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2378  *
2379  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2380  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2381  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2382  *
2383  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2384  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2385  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2386  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2387  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2388  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2389  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2390  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2391  *
2392  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2393  *	can handle.
2394  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2395  *	the hw can report back.
2396  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2397  *
2398  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2399  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2400  *	aggregation.
2401  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2402  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2403  *	it shouldn't be set.
2404  *
2405  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2406  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2407  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2408  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2409  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2410  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2411  *
2412  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2413  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2414  *
2415  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2416  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2417  *
2418  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2419  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2420  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2421  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2422  *
2423  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2424  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2425  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2426  *
2427  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2428  *
2429  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2430  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2431  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2432  *	device_timestamp.
2433  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2434  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2435  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2436  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2437  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2438  *
2439  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2440  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2441  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2442  *
2443  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2444  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2445  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2446  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2447  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2448  *	neither enabled.
2449  *
2450  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2451  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2452  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2453  *
2454  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2455  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2456  *	supported by HW.
2457  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2458  *	device.
2459  *
2460  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2461  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2462  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2463  *
2464  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2465  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2466  */
2467 struct ieee80211_hw {
2468 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2469 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2470 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2471 	void *priv;
2472 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2473 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2474 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2475 	int vif_data_size;
2476 	int sta_data_size;
2477 	int chanctx_data_size;
2478 	int txq_data_size;
2479 	u16 queues;
2480 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2481 	s8 max_signal;
2482 	u8 max_rates;
2483 	u8 max_report_rates;
2484 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2485 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2486 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2487 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2488 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2489 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2490 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2491 	struct {
2492 		int units_pos;
2493 		s16 accuracy;
2494 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2495 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2496 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2497 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2498 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2499 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2500 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2501 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2502 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2503 };
2504 
2505 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2506 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2507 {
2508 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2509 }
2510 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2511 
2512 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2513 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2514 {
2515 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2516 }
2517 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2518 
2519 /**
2520  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2521  *
2522  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2523  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2524  */
2525 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2526 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2527 
2528 	/* Keep last */
2529 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2530 };
2531 
2532 /**
2533  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2534  *
2535  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2536  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2537  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2538  * @status: channel-switch response status
2539  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2540  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2541  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2542  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2543  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2544  */
2545 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2546 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2547 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2548 	u8 action_code;
2549 	u32 status;
2550 	u32 timestamp;
2551 	u16 switch_time;
2552 	u16 switch_timeout;
2553 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2554 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2555 };
2556 
2557 /**
2558  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2559  *
2560  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2561  *
2562  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2563  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2564  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2565  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2566  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2567  *
2568  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2569  */
2570 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2571 
2572 /**
2573  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2574  *
2575  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2576  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2577  */
2578 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2579 {
2580 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2581 }
2582 
2583 /**
2584  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2585  *
2586  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2587  * @addr: the address to set
2588  */
2589 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2590 {
2591 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2592 }
2593 
2594 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2595 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2596 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2597 {
2598 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2599 		return NULL;
2600 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2601 }
2602 
2603 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2604 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2605 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2606 {
2607 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2608 		return NULL;
2609 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2610 }
2611 
2612 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2613 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2614 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2615 {
2616 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2617 		return NULL;
2618 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2619 }
2620 
2621 /**
2622  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2623  * @hw: the hardware
2624  * @skb: the skb
2625  *
2626  * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2627  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2628  */
2629 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2630 
2631 /**
2632  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2633  *
2634  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2635  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2636  *
2637  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2638  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2639  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2640  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2641  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2642  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2643  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2644  *
2645  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2646  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2647  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2648  *
2649  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2650  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2651  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2652  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2653  *
2654  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2655  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2656  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2657  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2658  *
2659  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2660  *
2661  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2662  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2663  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2664  * based on the receive flags.
2665  *
2666  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2667  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2668  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2669  * keys.
2670  *
2671  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2672  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2673  * handler.
2674  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2675  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2676  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2677  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2678  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2679  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2680  *
2681  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2682  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2683  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2684  *
2685  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2686  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2687  * requirements:
2688  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2689       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2690       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2691    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2692       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2693    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2694       encrypted with the new key and
2695    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2696    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2697  */
2698 
2699 /**
2700  * DOC: Powersave support
2701  *
2702  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2703  *
2704  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2705  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2706  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2707  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2708  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2709  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2710  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2711  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2712  *
2713  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2714  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2715  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2716  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2717  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2718  *
2719  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2720  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2721  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2722  *
2723  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2724  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2725  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2726  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2727  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2728  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2729  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2730  *
2731  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2732  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2733  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2734  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2735  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2736  * periods.
2737  *
2738  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2739  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2740  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2741  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2742  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2743  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2744  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2745  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2746  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2747  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2748  *
2749  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2750  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2751  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2752  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2753  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2754  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2755  *
2756  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2757  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2758  */
2759 
2760 /**
2761  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2762  *
2763  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2764  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2765  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2766  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2767  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2768  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2769  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2770  *
2771  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2772  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2773  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2774  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2775  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2776  *
2777  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2778  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2779  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2780  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2781  *
2782  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2783  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2784  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2785  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2786  *
2787  *  - a list of information element IDs
2788  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2789  *
2790  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2791  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2792  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2793  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2794  * vendor information elements.
2795  *
2796  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2797  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2798  *
2799  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2800  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2801  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2802  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2803  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2804  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2805  *
2806  *
2807  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2808  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2809  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2810  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2811  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2812  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2813  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2814  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2815  *
2816  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2817  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2818  * signal strength threshold checking.
2819  */
2820 
2821 /**
2822  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2823  *
2824  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2825  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2826  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2827  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2828  *
2829  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2830  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2831  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2832  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2833  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2834  * hardware flags.
2835  *
2836  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2837  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2838  * turned off otherwise.
2839  *
2840  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2841  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2842  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2843  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2844  */
2845 
2846 /**
2847  * DOC: Frame filtering
2848  *
2849  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2850  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2851  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2852  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2853  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2854  *
2855  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2856  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2857  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2858  *
2859  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2860  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2861  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2862  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2863  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2864  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2865  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2866  *
2867  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2868  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2869  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2870  * or dropped.
2871  *
2872  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2873  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2874  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2875  * the flag, but not clear it.
2876  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2877  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2878  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2879  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2880  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2881  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2882  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2883  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2884  */
2885 
2886 /**
2887  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2888  *
2889  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2890  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2891  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2892  *
2893  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2894  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2895  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2896  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2897  * the driver code.
2898  *
2899  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2900  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2901  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2902  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2903  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2904  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2905  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2906  *
2907  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2908  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2909  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2910  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2911  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2912  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2913  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2914  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2915  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2916  * @sta_notify callback.
2917  *
2918  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2919  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2920  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2921  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2922  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2923  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2924  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2925  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2926  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2927  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2928  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2929  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2930  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2931  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2932  *
2933  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2934  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2935  *
2936  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2937  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2938  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2939  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2940  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2941  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2942  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2943  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2944  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2945  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2946  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2947  *
2948  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2949  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2950  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2951  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2952  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2953  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2954  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2955  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2956  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2957  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2958  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2959  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2960  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2961  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2962  *
2963  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2964  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2965  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2966  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2967  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2968  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2969  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2970  *
2971  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2972  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2973  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2974  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2975  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2976  *
2977  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2978  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2979  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2980  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2981  */
2982 
2983 /**
2984  * DOC: HW queue control
2985  *
2986  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2987  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2988  * was problematic for a few reasons:
2989  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2990  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2991  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2992  *
2993  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2994  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2995  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2996  *
2997  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2998  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2999  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3000  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3001  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3002  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3003  * the hardware queue.
3004  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3005  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3006  *
3007  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3008  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3009  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3010  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3011  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3012  *
3013  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3014  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3015  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3016  * off-channel queue:         9
3017  *
3018  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3019  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3020  *
3021  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3022  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3023  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3024  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3025  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3026  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3027  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3028  *
3029  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3030  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3031  *
3032  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3033  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3034  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3035  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3036  */
3037 
3038 /**
3039  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3040  *
3041  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3042  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3043  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3044  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3045  *
3046  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3047  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3048  *	multicast address.
3049  *
3050  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3051  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3052  *
3053  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3054  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3055  *
3056  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3057  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3058  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3059  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3060  *	honour this flag if possible.
3061  *
3062  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3063  *	station
3064  *
3065  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3066  *
3067  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3068  *
3069  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3070  */
3071 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3072 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3073 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3074 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3075 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3076 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3077 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3078 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3079 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3080 };
3081 
3082 /**
3083  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3084  *
3085  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3086  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3087  *
3088  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3089  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3090  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3091  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3092  *
3093  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3094  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3095  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3096  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3097  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3098  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3099  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3100  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3101  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3102  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3103  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3104  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3105  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3106  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3107  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3108  */
3109 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3110 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3111 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3112 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3113 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3114 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3115 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3116 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3117 };
3118 
3119 /**
3120  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3121  *
3122  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3123  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3124  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3125  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3126  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3127  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3128  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3129  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3130  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3131  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3132  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3133  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3134  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3135  */
3136 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3137 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3138 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3139 	u16 tid;
3140 	u16 ssn;
3141 	u16 buf_size;
3142 	bool amsdu;
3143 	u16 timeout;
3144 };
3145 
3146 /**
3147  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3148  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3149  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3150  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3151  */
3152 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3153 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3154 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3155 };
3156 
3157 /**
3158  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3159  *
3160  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3161  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3162  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3163  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3164  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3165  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3166  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3167  *	the peer.
3168  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3169  *	by the peer
3170  */
3171 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3172 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3173 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3174 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3175 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3176 };
3177 
3178 /**
3179  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3180  *
3181  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3182  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3183  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3184  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3185  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3186  *
3187  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3188  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3189  *	for sending managment frames offchannel.
3190  */
3191 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3192 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3193 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3194 };
3195 
3196 /**
3197  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3198  *
3199  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3200  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3201  *
3202  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3203  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3204  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3205  *	of wowlan configuration)
3206  */
3207 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3208 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3209 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3210 };
3211 
3212 /**
3213  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3214  *
3215  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3216  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3217  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3218  *
3219  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3220  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3221  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3222  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3223  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3224  *	Must be atomic.
3225  *
3226  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3227  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3228  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3229  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3230  *	or zero.
3231  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3232  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3233  *	is added.
3234  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3235  *
3236  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3237  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3238  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3239  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3240  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3241  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3242  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3243  *
3244  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3245  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3246  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3247  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3248  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3249  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3250  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3251  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3252  *	must return 1 from this function.
3253  *
3254  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3255  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3256  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3257  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3258  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3259  *
3260  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3261  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3262  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3263  *	in suspend().
3264  *
3265  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3266  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3267  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3268  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3269  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3270  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3271  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3272  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3273  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3274  *
3275  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3276  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3277  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3278  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3279  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3280  *
3281  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3282  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3283  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3284  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3285  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3286  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3287  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3288  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3289  *
3290  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3291  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3292  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3293  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3294  *
3295  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3296  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3297  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3298  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3299  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3300  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3301  *	can sleep.
3302  *
3303  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3304  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3305  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3306  *
3307  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3308  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3309  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3310  *
3311  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3312  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3313  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3314  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3315  *	which flags are changed.
3316  *	This callback can sleep.
3317  *
3318  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3319  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3320  *
3321  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3322  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3323  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3324  *	is enabled.
3325  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3326  *	The callback can sleep.
3327  *
3328  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3329  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3330  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3331  *	The callback must be atomic.
3332  *
3333  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3334  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3335  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3336  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3337  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3338  *
3339  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3340  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3341  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3342  *
3343  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3344  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3345  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3346  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3347  *	that power save is disabled.
3348  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3349  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3350  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3351  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3352  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3353  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3354  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3355  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3356  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3357  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3358  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3359  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3360  *	The callback can sleep.
3361  *
3362  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3363  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3364  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3365  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3366  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3367  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3368  *	The callback can sleep.
3369  *
3370  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3371  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3372  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3373  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3374  *
3375  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3376  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3377  *
3378  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3379  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3380  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3381  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3382  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3383  *
3384  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3385  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3386  *	this notification.
3387  *	The callback can sleep.
3388  *
3389  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3390  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3391  *	The callback can sleep.
3392  *
3393  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3394  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3395  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3396  *	The callback must be atomic.
3397  *
3398  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3399  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3400  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3401  *	should be set as well.
3402  *	The callback can sleep.
3403  *
3404  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3405  *	The callback can sleep.
3406  *
3407  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3408  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3409  *
3410  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3411  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3412  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3413  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3414  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3415  *	This callback can sleep.
3416  *
3417  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3418  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3419  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3420  *	callback can sleep.
3421  *
3422  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3423  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3424  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3425  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3426  *
3427  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3428  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3429  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3430  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3431  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3432  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3433  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3434  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3435  *	The callback can sleep.
3436  *
3437  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3438  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3439  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3440  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3441  *	in @sta_state.
3442  *	The callback can sleep.
3443  *
3444  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3445  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3446  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3447  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3448  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3449  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3450  *	Must be atomic.
3451  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3452  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3453  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3454  *
3455  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3456  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3457  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3458  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3459  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3460  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3461  *	The callback can sleep.
3462  *
3463  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3464  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3465  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3466  *	The callback can sleep.
3467  *
3468  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3469  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3470  *	required function.
3471  *	The callback can sleep.
3472  *
3473  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3474  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3475  *	required function.
3476  *	The callback can sleep.
3477  *
3478  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3479  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3480  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3481  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3482  *	The callback can sleep.
3483  *
3484  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3485  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3486  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3487  *	TSF synchronization.
3488  *	The callback can sleep.
3489  *
3490  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3491  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3492  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3493  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3494  *	The callback can sleep.
3495  *
3496  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3497  *
3498  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3499  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3500  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3501  *	The callback can sleep.
3502  *
3503  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3504  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3505  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3506  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3507  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3508  *
3509  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3510  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3511  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3512  *
3513  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3514  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3515  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3516  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3517  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3518  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3519  *	The callback can sleep.
3520  *
3521  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3522  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3523  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3524  *	completion of the channel switch.
3525  *
3526  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3527  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3528  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3529  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3530  *
3531  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3532  *
3533  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3534  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3535  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3536  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3537  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3538  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3539  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3540  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3541  *	must be accepted in this case.
3542  *	This callback may sleep.
3543  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3544  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3545  *
3546  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3547  *
3548  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3549  *
3550  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3551  *	queues before entering power save.
3552  *
3553  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3554  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3555  *	The callback can sleep.
3556  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3557  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3558  *	The callback must be atomic.
3559  *
3560  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3561  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3562  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3563  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3564  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3565  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3566  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3567  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3568  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3569  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3570  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3571  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3572  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3573  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3574  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3575  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3576  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3577  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3578  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3579  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3580  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3581  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3582  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3583  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3584  *	This callback must be atomic.
3585  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3586  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3587  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3588  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3589  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3590  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3591  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3592  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3593  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3594  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3595  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3596  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3597  *	This callback must be atomic.
3598  *
3599  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3600  *
3601  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3602  *
3603  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3604  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3605  *
3606  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3607  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3608  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3609  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3610  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3611  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3612  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3613  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3614  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3615  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3616  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3617  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3618  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3619  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3620  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3621  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3622  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3623  *
3624  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3625  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3626  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3627  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3628  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3629  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3630  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3631  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3632  *
3633  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3634  *	This callback may sleep.
3635  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3636  *	This callback may sleep.
3637  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3638  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3639  *	channel context with different settings
3640  *	This callback may sleep.
3641  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3642  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3643  *	This callback may sleep.
3644  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3645  *	unbound from vif.
3646  *	This callback may sleep.
3647  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3648  *	another, as specified in the list of
3649  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3650  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3651  *	This callback may sleep.
3652  *
3653  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3654  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3655  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3656  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3657  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3658  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3659  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3660  *
3661  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3662  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3663  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3664  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3665  *	This callback may sleep.
3666  *
3667  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3668  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3669  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3670  *
3671  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3672  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3673  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3674  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3675  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3676  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3677  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3678  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3679  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3680  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3681  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3682  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3683  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3684  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3685  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3686  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3687  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3688  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3689  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3690  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3691  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3692  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3693  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3694  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3695  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3696  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3697  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3698  *
3699  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3700  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3701  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3702  *
3703  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3704  *	and hardware limits.
3705  *
3706  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3707  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3708  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3709  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3710  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3711  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3712  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3713  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3714  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3715  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3716  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3717  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3718  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3719  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3720  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3721  *	the function call.
3722  *
3723  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3724  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3725  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3726  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3727  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3728  *
3729  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3730  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3731  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3732  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3733  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3734  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3735  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3736  *	changed parameters.
3737  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3738  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3739  *	this call.
3740  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3741  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3742  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3743  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3744  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3745  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3746  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3747  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3748  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3749  *
3750  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3751  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3752  */
3753 struct ieee80211_ops {
3754 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3755 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3756 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3757 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3758 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3759 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3760 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3761 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3762 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3763 #endif
3764 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3765 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3766 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3767 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3768 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3769 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3770 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3771 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3772 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3773 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3774 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3775 				 u32 changed);
3776 
3777 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3778 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3779 
3780 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3781 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3782 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3783 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3784 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3785 				 u64 multicast);
3786 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3787 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3788 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3789 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3790 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3791 		       bool set);
3792 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3793 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3794 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3795 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3796 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3797 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3798 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3799 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3800 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3801 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3802 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3803 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3804 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3805 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3806 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3807 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3808 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3809 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3810 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3811 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3812 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3813 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3814 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3815 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3816 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3817 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3818 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3819 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3820 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3821 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3822 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3823 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3824 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3825 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3826 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3827 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3828 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3829 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3830 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3831 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3832 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3833 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3834 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3835 				struct dentry *dir);
3836 #endif
3837 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3838 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3839 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3840 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3842 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3843 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3844 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3845 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3846 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3847 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3848 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3849 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3850 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3851 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3852 			      u32 changed);
3853 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3854 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3855 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3856 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3857 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3858 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3859 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3860 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3861 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3862 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3863 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3864 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3865 			u64 tsf);
3866 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3867 			   s64 offset);
3868 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3869 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3870 
3871 	/**
3872 	 * @ampdu_action:
3873 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3874 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3875 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3876 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3877 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3878 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3879 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3880 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3881 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3882 	 *
3883 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3884 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3885 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3886 	 *
3887 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3888 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3889 	 *
3890 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3891 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3892 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3893 	 *
3894 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3895 	 *
3896 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3897 	 * The callback can sleep.
3898 	 */
3899 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3900 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3901 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3902 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3903 		struct survey_info *survey);
3904 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3905 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3906 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3907 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3908 			    void *data, int len);
3909 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3910 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3911 			     void *data, int len);
3912 #endif
3913 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3914 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3915 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3916 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3918 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3919 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3920 
3921 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3922 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3923 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3924 				 int duration,
3925 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3926 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3927 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3928 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3929 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3930 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3931 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3932 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3933 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3934 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3935 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3936 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3937 
3938 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3939 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3940 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3941 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3942 				      bool more_data);
3943 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3944 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3945 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3946 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3947 					bool more_data);
3948 
3949 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3950 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3951 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3952 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3953 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3954 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3955 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3956 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3957 
3958 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3959 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3960 				  u16 duration);
3961 
3962 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3963 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3964 
3965 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3967 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3969 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3970 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3971 			       u32 changed);
3972 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3973 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3974 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3975 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3976 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3977 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3978 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3980 				  int n_vifs,
3981 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3982 
3983 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3984 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3985 
3986 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3987 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3988 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3989 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3990 #endif
3991 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3992 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3993 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3994 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3996 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3997 
3998 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4000 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4001 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4002 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4004 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4005 
4006 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4007 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4008 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4010 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4011 			   int *dbm);
4012 
4013 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4015 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4016 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4017 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4018 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4020 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4021 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4024 
4025 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4027 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4028 
4029 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4032 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4033 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4034 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4035 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4036 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4037 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4038 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4039 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4040 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 			    u8 instance_id);
4043 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4044 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4045 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4046 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4048 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4049 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4051 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4052 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4053 };
4054 
4055 /**
4056  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4057  *
4058  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4059  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4060  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4061  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4062  * @priv_data_len.
4063  *
4064  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4065  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4066  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4067  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4068  *
4069  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4070  */
4071 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4072 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4073 					   const char *requested_name);
4074 
4075 /**
4076  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4077  *
4078  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4079  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4080  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4081  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4082  * @priv_data_len.
4083  *
4084  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4085  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4086  *
4087  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4088  */
4089 static inline
4090 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4091 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4092 {
4093 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4094 }
4095 
4096 /**
4097  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4098  *
4099  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4100  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4101  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4102  *
4103  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4104  *
4105  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4106  */
4107 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4108 
4109 /**
4110  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4111  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4112  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4113  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4114  */
4115 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4116 	int throughput;
4117 	int blink_time;
4118 };
4119 
4120 /**
4121  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4122  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4123  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4124  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4125  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4126  */
4127 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4128 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4129 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4130 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4131 };
4132 
4133 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4134 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4135 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4136 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4137 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4138 const char *
4139 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4140 				   unsigned int flags,
4141 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4142 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4143 #endif
4144 /**
4145  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4146  *
4147  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4148  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4149  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4150  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4151  *
4152  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4153  *
4154  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4155  */
4156 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4157 {
4158 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4159 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4160 #else
4161 	return NULL;
4162 #endif
4163 }
4164 
4165 /**
4166  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4167  *
4168  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4169  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4170  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4171  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4172  *
4173  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4174  *
4175  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4176  */
4177 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4178 {
4179 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4180 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4181 #else
4182 	return NULL;
4183 #endif
4184 }
4185 
4186 /**
4187  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4188  *
4189  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4190  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4191  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4192  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4193  *
4194  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4195  *
4196  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4197  */
4198 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4199 {
4200 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4201 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4202 #else
4203 	return NULL;
4204 #endif
4205 }
4206 
4207 /**
4208  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4209  *
4210  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4211  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4212  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4213  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4214  *
4215  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4216  *
4217  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4218  */
4219 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4220 {
4221 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4222 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4223 #else
4224 	return NULL;
4225 #endif
4226 }
4227 
4228 /**
4229  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4230  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4231  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4232  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4233  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4234  *
4235  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4236  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4237  *
4238  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4239  */
4240 static inline const char *
4241 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4242 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4243 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4244 {
4245 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4246 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4247 						  blink_table_len);
4248 #else
4249 	return NULL;
4250 #endif
4251 }
4252 
4253 /**
4254  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4255  *
4256  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4257  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4258  *
4259  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4260  */
4261 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4262 
4263 /**
4264  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4265  *
4266  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4267  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4268  * before calling this function.
4269  *
4270  * @hw: the hardware to free
4271  */
4272 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4273 
4274 /**
4275  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4276  *
4277  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4278  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4279  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4280  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4281  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4282  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4283  *
4284  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4285  */
4286 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4287 
4288 /**
4289  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4290  *
4291  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4292  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4293  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4294  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4295  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4296  *
4297  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4298  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4299  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4300  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4301  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4302  *
4303  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4304  *
4305  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4306  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4307  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4308  * @napi: the NAPI context
4309  */
4310 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4311 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4312 
4313 /**
4314  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4315  *
4316  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4317  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4318  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4319  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4320  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4321  *
4322  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4323  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4324  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4325  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4326  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4327  *
4328  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4329  *
4330  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4331  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4332  */
4333 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4334 {
4335 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4336 }
4337 
4338 /**
4339  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4340  *
4341  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4342  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4343  *
4344  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4345  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4346  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4347  *
4348  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4349  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4350  */
4351 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4352 
4353 /**
4354  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4355  *
4356  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4357  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4358  *
4359  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4360  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4361  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4362  *
4363  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4364  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4365  */
4366 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4367 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4368 {
4369 	local_bh_disable();
4370 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4371 	local_bh_enable();
4372 }
4373 
4374 /**
4375  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4376  *
4377  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4378  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4379  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4380  *
4381  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4382  *
4383  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4384  * each other.
4385  *
4386  * @sta: currently connected sta
4387  * @start: start or stop PS
4388  *
4389  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4390  */
4391 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4392 
4393 /**
4394  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4395  *                                  (in process context)
4396  *
4397  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4398  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4399  * applies.
4400  *
4401  * @sta: currently connected sta
4402  * @start: start or stop PS
4403  *
4404  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4405  */
4406 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4407 						  bool start)
4408 {
4409 	int ret;
4410 
4411 	local_bh_disable();
4412 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4413 	local_bh_enable();
4414 
4415 	return ret;
4416 }
4417 
4418 /**
4419  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4420  * @sta: currently connected station
4421  *
4422  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4423  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4424  * connected station was received.
4425  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4426  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4427  * be serialized.
4428  */
4429 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4430 
4431 /**
4432  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4433  * @sta: currently connected station
4434  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4435  *
4436  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4437  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4438  * from a connected station was received.
4439  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4440  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4441  * serialized.
4442  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4443  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4444  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4445  * checks.
4446  */
4447 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4448 
4449 /*
4450  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4451  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4452  */
4453 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4454 
4455 /**
4456  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4457  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4458  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4459  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4460  *
4461  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4462  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4463  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4464  *
4465  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4466  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4467  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4468  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4469  *
4470  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4471  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4472  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4473  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4474  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4475  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4476  *
4477  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4478  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4479  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4480  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4481  * use this API.
4482  */
4483 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4484 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4485 
4486 /**
4487  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4488  *
4489  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4490  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4491  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4492  *
4493  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4494  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4495  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4496  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4497  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4498  */
4499 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4500 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4501 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4502 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4503 			    int max_rates);
4504 
4505 /**
4506  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4507  *
4508  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4509  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4510  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4511  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4512  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4513  * slow stations to starve).
4514  *
4515  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4516  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4517  */
4518 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4519 					   u32 thr);
4520 
4521 /**
4522  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4523  *
4524  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4525  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4526  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4527  *
4528  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4529  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4530  * @info: tx status information
4531  */
4532 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4533 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4534 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4535 
4536 /**
4537  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4538  *
4539  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4540  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4541  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4542  *
4543  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4544  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4545  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4546  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4547  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4548  *
4549  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4550  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4551  */
4552 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4553 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4554 
4555 /**
4556  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4557  *
4558  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4559  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4560  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4561  *
4562  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4563  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4564  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4565  *
4566  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4567  * @status: tx status information
4568  */
4569 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4570 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4571 
4572 /**
4573  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4574  *
4575  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4576  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4577  * specific skbs.
4578  *
4579  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4580  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4581  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4582  *
4583  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4584  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4585  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4586  * @info: tx status information
4587  */
4588 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4589 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4590 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4591 {
4592 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4593 		.sta = sta,
4594 		.info = info,
4595 	};
4596 
4597 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4598 }
4599 
4600 /**
4601  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4602  *
4603  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4604  *
4605  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4606  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4607  * for a single hardware.
4608  *
4609  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4610  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4611  */
4612 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4613 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4614 {
4615 	local_bh_disable();
4616 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4617 	local_bh_enable();
4618 }
4619 
4620 /**
4621  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4622  *
4623  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4624  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4625  *
4626  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4627  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4628  *
4629  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4630  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4631  */
4632 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4633 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4634 
4635 /**
4636  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4637  *
4638  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4639  * connected STA.
4640  *
4641  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4642  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4643  */
4644 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4645 
4646 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4647 
4648 /**
4649  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4650  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4651  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4652  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4653  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4654  *	should be ignored.
4655  */
4656 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4657 	u16 tim_offset;
4658 	u16 tim_length;
4659 
4660 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4661 };
4662 
4663 /**
4664  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4665  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4666  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4667  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4668  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4669  *
4670  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4671  * obtain the beacon template.
4672  *
4673  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4674  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4675  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4676  * applicable, the CSA count.
4677  *
4678  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4679  *
4680  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4681  */
4682 struct sk_buff *
4683 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4684 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4685 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4686 
4687 /**
4688  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4689  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4690  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4691  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4692  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4693  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4694  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4695  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4696  *
4697  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4698  * obtain the beacon frame.
4699  *
4700  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4701  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4702  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4703  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4704  *
4705  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4706  *
4707  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4708  */
4709 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4710 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4711 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4712 
4713 /**
4714  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4715  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4716  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4717  *
4718  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4719  *
4720  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4721  */
4722 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4723 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4724 {
4725 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4726 }
4727 
4728 /**
4729  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4730  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4731  *
4732  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4733  * This function is called implicitly when
4734  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4735  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4736  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4737  *
4738  * Return: new csa counter value
4739  */
4740 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4741 
4742 /**
4743  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4744  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4745  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4746  *
4747  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4748  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4749  *
4750  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4751  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4752  */
4753 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4754 
4755 /**
4756  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4757  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4758  *
4759  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4760  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4761  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4762  */
4763 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4764 
4765 /**
4766  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4767  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4768  *
4769  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4770  */
4771 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4772 
4773 
4774 /**
4775  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4776  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4777  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4778  *
4779  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4780  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4781  *
4782  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4783  *
4784  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4785  */
4786 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4787 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4788 
4789 /**
4790  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4791  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4792  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4793  *
4794  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4795  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4796  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4797  *
4798  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4799  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4800  *
4801  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4802  */
4803 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4804 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4805 
4806 /**
4807  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4808  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4809  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4810  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4811  *	if at all possible
4812  *
4813  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4814  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4815  * BSSID and address is used.
4816  *
4817  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4818  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4819  *
4820  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4821  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4822  *
4823  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4824  */
4825 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4826 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4827 				       bool qos_ok);
4828 
4829 /**
4830  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4831  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4832  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4833  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4834  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4835  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4836  *
4837  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4838  * hardware.
4839  *
4840  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4841  */
4842 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4843 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4844 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4845 				       size_t tailroom);
4846 
4847 /**
4848  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4849  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4850  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4851  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4852  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4853  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4854  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4855  *
4856  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4857  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4858  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4859  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4860  */
4861 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4862 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4863 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4864 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4865 
4866 /**
4867  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4868  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4869  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4870  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4871  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4872  *
4873  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4874  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4875  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4876  *
4877  * Return: The duration.
4878  */
4879 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4880 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4881 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4882 
4883 /**
4884  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4885  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4886  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4887  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4888  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4889  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4890  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4891  *
4892  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4893  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4894  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4895  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4896  */
4897 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4898 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4899 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4900 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4901 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4902 
4903 /**
4904  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4905  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4906  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4907  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4908  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4909  *
4910  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4911  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4912  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4913  *
4914  * Return: The duration.
4915  */
4916 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4917 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4918 				    size_t frame_len,
4919 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4920 
4921 /**
4922  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4923  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4924  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4925  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4926  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4927  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4928  *
4929  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4930  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4931  *
4932  * Return: The duration.
4933  */
4934 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4935 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4936 					enum nl80211_band band,
4937 					size_t frame_len,
4938 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4939 
4940 /**
4941  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4942  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4943  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4944  *
4945  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4946  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4947  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4948  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4949  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4950  *
4951  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4952  * frames are available.
4953  *
4954  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4955  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4956  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4957  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4958  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4959  * use common code for all beacons.
4960  */
4961 struct sk_buff *
4962 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4963 
4964 /**
4965  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4966  *
4967  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4968  *
4969  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4970  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4971  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4972  */
4973 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4974 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4975 
4976 /**
4977  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4978  *
4979  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4980  * from the given packet.
4981  *
4982  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4983  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4984  *	with this P1K
4985  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4986  */
4987 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4988 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4989 {
4990 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4991 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4992 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4993 
4994 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4995 }
4996 
4997 /**
4998  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4999  *
5000  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5001  * and transmitter address.
5002  *
5003  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5004  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5005  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5006  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5007  */
5008 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5009 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5010 
5011 /**
5012  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5013  *
5014  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5015  * in the packet.
5016  *
5017  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5018  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5019  *	encrypted with this key
5020  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5021  */
5022 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5023 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5024 
5025 /**
5026  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5027  *
5028  * @pos: start of crypto header
5029  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5030  * @pn: PN to add
5031  *
5032  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5033  * the packet payload)
5034  *
5035  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5036  * point to the crypto header)
5037  */
5038 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5039 
5040 /**
5041  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5042  *
5043  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5044  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5045  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5046  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5047  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5048  *
5049  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5050  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5051  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5052  *
5053  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5054  * can be done concurrently.
5055  */
5056 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5057 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5058 
5059 /**
5060  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5061  *
5062  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5063  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5064  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5065  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5066  * @seq: new sequence data
5067  *
5068  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5069  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5070  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5071  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5072  *
5073  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5074  * can be done concurrently.
5075  */
5076 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5077 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5078 
5079 /**
5080  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5081  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5082  *
5083  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5084  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5085  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5086  *
5087  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5088  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5089  */
5090 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5091 
5092 /**
5093  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5094  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5095  * @keyconf: new key data
5096  *
5097  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5098  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5099  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5100  *
5101  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5102  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5103  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5104  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5105  *
5106  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5107  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5108  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5109  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5110  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5111  * of the reconfiguration.
5112  *
5113  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5114  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5115  *
5116  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5117  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5118  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5119  * the key that's being replaced.
5120  */
5121 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5122 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5123 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5124 
5125 /**
5126  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5127  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5128  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5129  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5130  * @gfp: allocation flags
5131  */
5132 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5133 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5134 
5135 /**
5136  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5137  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5138  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5139  *
5140  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5141  */
5142 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5143 
5144 /**
5145  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5146  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5147  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5148  *
5149  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5150  */
5151 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5152 
5153 /**
5154  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5155  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5156  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5157  *
5158  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5159  *
5160  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5161  */
5162 
5163 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5164 
5165 /**
5166  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5167  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5168  *
5169  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5170  */
5171 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5172 
5173 /**
5174  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5175  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5176  *
5177  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5178  */
5179 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5180 
5181 /**
5182  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5183  *
5184  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5185  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5186  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5187  * any context, including hardirq context.
5188  *
5189  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5190  * @info: information about the completed scan
5191  */
5192 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5193 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5194 
5195 /**
5196  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5197  *
5198  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5199  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5200  *
5201  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5202  */
5203 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5204 
5205 /**
5206  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5207  *
5208  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5209  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5210  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5211  * while associating, for instance.
5212  *
5213  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5214  */
5215 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5216 
5217 /**
5218  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5219  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5220  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5221  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5222  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5223  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5224  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5225  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5226  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5227  */
5228 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5229 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5230 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5231 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5232 };
5233 
5234 /**
5235  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5236  *
5237  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5238  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5239  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5240  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5241  *
5242  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5243  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5244  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5245  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5246  */
5247 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5248 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5249 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5250 				  void *data);
5251 
5252 /**
5253  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5254  *
5255  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5256  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5257  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5258  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5259  * be used.
5260  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5261  *
5262  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5263  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5264  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5265  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5266  */
5267 static inline void
5268 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5269 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5270 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5271 				    void *data)
5272 {
5273 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5274 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5275 				     iterator, data);
5276 }
5277 
5278 /**
5279  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5280  *
5281  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5282  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5283  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5284  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5285  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5286  *
5287  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5288  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5289  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5290  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5291  */
5292 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5293 						u32 iter_flags,
5294 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5295 						    u8 *mac,
5296 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5297 						void *data);
5298 
5299 /**
5300  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5301  *
5302  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5303  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5304  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5305  *
5306  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5307  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5308  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5309  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5310  */
5311 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5312 					      u32 iter_flags,
5313 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5314 						u8 *mac,
5315 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5316 					      void *data);
5317 
5318 /**
5319  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5320  *
5321  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5322  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5323  * function for them.
5324  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5325  *
5326  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5327  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5328  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5329  */
5330 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5331 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5332 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5333 				       void *data);
5334 /**
5335  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5336  *
5337  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5338  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5339  *
5340  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5341  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5342  */
5343 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5344 
5345 /**
5346  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5347  *
5348  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5349  * workqueue.
5350  *
5351  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5352  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5353  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5354  */
5355 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5356 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5357 				  unsigned long delay);
5358 
5359 /**
5360  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5361  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5362  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5363  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5364  *
5365  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5366  *
5367  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5368  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5369  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5370  */
5371 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5372 				  u16 timeout);
5373 
5374 /**
5375  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5376  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5377  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5378  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5379  *
5380  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5381  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5382  * from any context.
5383  */
5384 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5385 				      u16 tid);
5386 
5387 /**
5388  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5389  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5390  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5391  *
5392  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5393  *
5394  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5395  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5396  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5397  */
5398 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5399 
5400 /**
5401  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5402  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5403  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5404  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5405  *
5406  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5407  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5408  * can be called from any context.
5409  */
5410 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5411 				     u16 tid);
5412 
5413 /**
5414  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5415  *
5416  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5417  * @addr: station's address
5418  *
5419  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5420  *
5421  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5422  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5423  */
5424 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5425 					 const u8 *addr);
5426 
5427 /**
5428  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5429  *
5430  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5431  * @addr: remote station's address
5432  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5433  *
5434  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5435  *
5436  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5437  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5438  *
5439  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5440  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5441  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5442  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5443  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5444  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5445  *      is not reliable.
5446  *
5447  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5448  */
5449 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5450 					       const u8 *addr,
5451 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5452 
5453 /**
5454  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5455  * @hw: the hardware
5456  * @pubsta: the station
5457  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5458  *
5459  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5460  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5461  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5462  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5463  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5464  *
5465  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5466  * manner.
5467  *
5468  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5469  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5470  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5471  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5472  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5473  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5474  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5475  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5476  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5477  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5478  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5479  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5480  * woke up while blocked or not.
5481  */
5482 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5483 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5484 
5485 /**
5486  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5487  * @pubsta: the station
5488  *
5489  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5490  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5491  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5492  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5493  *
5494  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5495  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5496  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5497  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5498  *
5499  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5500  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5501  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5502  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5503  */
5504 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5505 
5506 /**
5507  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5508  * @pubsta: the station
5509  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5510  *
5511  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5512  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5513  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5514  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5515  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5516  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5517  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5518  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5519  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5520  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5521  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5522  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5523  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5524  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5525  */
5526 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5527 
5528 /**
5529  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5530  *
5531  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5532  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5533  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5534  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5535  *
5536  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5537  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5538  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5539  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5540  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5541  * attempts.
5542  *
5543  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5544  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5545  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5546  * them to 0.
5547  *
5548  * @pubsta: the station
5549  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5550  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5551  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5552  */
5553 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5554 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5555 
5556 /**
5557  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5558  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5559  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5560  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5561  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5562  *
5563  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5564  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5565  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5566  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5567  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5568  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5569  *
5570  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5571  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5572  * set_key callback.
5573  */
5574 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5575 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5576 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5577 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5578 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5579 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5580 				      void *data),
5581 			 void *iter_data);
5582 
5583 /**
5584  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5585  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5586  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5587  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5588  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5589  *
5590  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5591  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5592  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5593  * in removal process will be skipped.
5594  *
5595  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5596  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5597  */
5598 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5599 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5600 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5601 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5602 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5603 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5604 					  void *data),
5605 			     void *iter_data);
5606 
5607 /**
5608  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5609  * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5610  * @iter: iterator function
5611  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5612  *
5613  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5614  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5615  * places while calling into the driver.
5616  *
5617  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5618  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5619  * removed.
5620  *
5621  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5622  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5623  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5624  * or not.
5625  */
5626 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5627 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5628 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5629 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5630 		     void *data),
5631 	void *iter_data);
5632 
5633 /**
5634  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5635  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5636  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5637  *
5638  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5639  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5640  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5641  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5642  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5643  * %NULL.
5644  *
5645  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5646  */
5647 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5648 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5649 
5650 /**
5651  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5652  *
5653  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5654  *
5655  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5656  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5657  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5658  */
5659 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5660 
5661 /**
5662  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5663  *
5664  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5665  *
5666  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5667  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5668  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5669  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5670  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5671  *
5672  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5673  * without connection recovery attempts.
5674  */
5675 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5676 
5677 /**
5678  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5679  *
5680  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5681  *
5682  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5683  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5684  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5685  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5686  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5687  *
5688  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5689  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5690  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5691  * disconnect normally later.
5692  *
5693  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5694  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5695  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5696  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5697  */
5698 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5699 
5700 /**
5701  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5702  *	rssi threshold triggered
5703  *
5704  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5705  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5706  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5707  * @gfp: context flags
5708  *
5709  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5710  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5711  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5712  */
5713 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5714 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5715 			       s32 rssi_level,
5716 			       gfp_t gfp);
5717 
5718 /**
5719  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5720  *
5721  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5722  * @gfp: context flags
5723  */
5724 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5725 
5726 /**
5727  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5728  *
5729  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5730  */
5731 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5732 
5733 /**
5734  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5735  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5736  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5737  *
5738  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5739  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5740  */
5741 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5742 
5743 /**
5744  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5745  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5746  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5747  *
5748  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5749  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5750  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5751  */
5752 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5753 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5754 
5755 /**
5756  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5757  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5758  */
5759 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5760 
5761 /**
5762  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5763  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5764  */
5765 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5766 
5767 /**
5768  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5769  *
5770  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5771  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5772  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5773  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5774  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5775  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5776  *
5777  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5778  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5779  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5780  */
5781 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5782 				  const u8 *addr);
5783 
5784 /**
5785  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5786  * @pubsta: station struct
5787  * @tid: the session's TID
5788  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5789  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5790  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5791  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5792  *
5793  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5794  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5795  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5796  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5797  */
5798 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5799 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5800 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5801 
5802 /**
5803  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5804  *
5805  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5806  * buffer.
5807  *
5808  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5809  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5810  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5811  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5812  */
5813 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5814 
5815 /**
5816  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5817  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5818  * @addr: station mac address
5819  * @tid: the rx tid
5820  */
5821 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5822 				 unsigned int tid);
5823 
5824 /**
5825  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5826  *
5827  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5828  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5829  * reordering.
5830  *
5831  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5832  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5833  *
5834  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5835  * @addr: station mac address
5836  * @tid: the rx tid
5837  */
5838 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5839 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5840 {
5841 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5842 		return;
5843 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5844 }
5845 
5846 /**
5847  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5848  *
5849  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5850  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5851  * reordering.
5852  *
5853  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5854  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5855  *
5856  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5857  * @addr: station mac address
5858  * @tid: the rx tid
5859  */
5860 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5861 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5862 {
5863 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5864 		return;
5865 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5866 }
5867 
5868 /**
5869  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5870  *
5871  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5872  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5873  *
5874  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5875  *
5876  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5877  * @addr: station mac address
5878  * @tid: the rx tid
5879  */
5880 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5881 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5882 
5883 /* Rate control API */
5884 
5885 /**
5886  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5887  *
5888  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5889  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5890  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5891  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5892  *	to be filled in
5893  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5894  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5895  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5896  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5897  *	RTS threshold
5898  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5899  *	if the selected rate supports it
5900  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5901  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5902  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5903  */
5904 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5905 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5906 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5907 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5908 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5909 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5910 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5911 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5912 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5913 	bool bss;
5914 };
5915 
5916 /**
5917  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5918  */
5919 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5920 	/**
5921 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5922 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5923 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5924 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5925 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5926 	 */
5927 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5928 };
5929 
5930 struct rate_control_ops {
5931 	unsigned long capa;
5932 	const char *name;
5933 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5934 	void (*free)(void *priv);
5935 
5936 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5937 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5938 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5939 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5940 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5941 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5942 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5943 			    u32 changed);
5944 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5945 			 void *priv_sta);
5946 
5947 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5948 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5949 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5950 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5951 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5952 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
5953 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5954 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5955 
5956 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5957 				struct dentry *dir);
5958 
5959 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5960 };
5961 
5962 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5963 				 enum nl80211_band band,
5964 				 int index)
5965 {
5966 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5967 }
5968 
5969 static inline s8
5970 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5971 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5972 {
5973 	int i;
5974 
5975 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5976 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5977 			return i;
5978 
5979 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5980 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5981 
5982 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5983 	return 0;
5984 }
5985 
5986 static inline
5987 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5988 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5989 {
5990 	unsigned int i;
5991 
5992 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5993 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5994 			return true;
5995 	return false;
5996 }
5997 
5998 /**
5999  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6000  *
6001  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6002  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6003  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6004  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6005  *
6006  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6007  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6008  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6009  */
6010 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6011 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6012 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6013 
6014 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6015 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6016 
6017 static inline bool
6018 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6019 {
6020 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6021 }
6022 
6023 static inline bool
6024 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6025 {
6026 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6027 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6028 }
6029 
6030 static inline bool
6031 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6032 {
6033 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6034 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6035 }
6036 
6037 static inline bool
6038 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6039 {
6040 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6041 }
6042 
6043 static inline bool
6044 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6045 {
6046 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6047 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6048 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6049 }
6050 
6051 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6052 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6053 {
6054 	if (p2p) {
6055 		switch (type) {
6056 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6057 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6058 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6059 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6060 		default:
6061 			break;
6062 		}
6063 	}
6064 	return type;
6065 }
6066 
6067 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6068 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6069 {
6070 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6071 }
6072 
6073 /**
6074  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6075  *
6076  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6077  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6078  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6079  *
6080  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6081  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6082  * matching GroupId management frame.
6083  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6084  */
6085 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6086 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6087 
6088 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6089 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6090 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6091 
6092 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6093 
6094 /**
6095  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6096  *
6097  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6098  *
6099  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6100  *
6101  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6102  * applicable.
6103  */
6104 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6105 
6106 /**
6107  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6108  * @vif: virtual interface
6109  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6110  * @gfp: allocation flags
6111  *
6112  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6113  */
6114 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6115 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6116 				    gfp_t gfp);
6117 
6118 /**
6119  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6120  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6121  * @vif: virtual interface
6122  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6123  * @band: the band to transmit on
6124  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6125  *
6126  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6127  */
6128 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6129 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6130 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6131 
6132 /**
6133  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6134  *
6135  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6136  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6137  *
6138  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6139  *
6140  * private:
6141  *
6142  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6143  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6144  */
6145 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6146 	u32 next_tsf;
6147 	bool has_next_tsf;
6148 
6149 	u8 absent;
6150 
6151 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6152 	struct {
6153 		u32 start;
6154 		u32 duration;
6155 		u32 interval;
6156 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6157 };
6158 
6159 /**
6160  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6161  *
6162  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6163  * @data: NoA tracking data
6164  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6165  *
6166  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6167  */
6168 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6169 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6170 
6171 /**
6172  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6173  *
6174  * @data: NoA tracking data
6175  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6176  */
6177 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6178 
6179 /**
6180  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6181  * @vif: virtual interface
6182  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6183  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6184  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6185  * @gfp: allocation flags
6186  *
6187  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6188  */
6189 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6190 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6191 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6192 
6193 /**
6194  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6195  *
6196  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6197  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6198  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6199  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6200  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6201  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6202  *
6203  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6204  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6205  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6206  *
6207  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6208  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6209  *
6210  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6211  */
6212 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6213 
6214 /**
6215  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6216  *
6217  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6218  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6219  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6220  *
6221  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6222  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6223  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6224  *
6225  * @sta: the station
6226  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6227  */
6228 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6229 
6230 /**
6231  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6232  *
6233  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6234  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6235  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6236  *
6237  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6238  *
6239  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6240  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6241  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6242  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6243  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6244  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6245  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6246  *
6247  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6248  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6249  */
6250 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6251 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6252 
6253 /**
6254  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6255  * (in process context)
6256  *
6257  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6258  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6259  *
6260  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6261  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6262  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6263  */
6264 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6265 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6266 {
6267 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6268 
6269 	local_bh_disable();
6270 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6271 	local_bh_enable();
6272 
6273 	return skb;
6274 }
6275 
6276 /**
6277  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6278  *
6279  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6280  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6281  *
6282  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6283  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6284  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6285  */
6286 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6287 
6288 /**
6289  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6290  *
6291  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6292  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6293  *
6294  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6295  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6296  */
6297 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6298 
6299 /* (deprecated) */
6300 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6301 {
6302 }
6303 
6304 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6305 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6306 
6307 /**
6308  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6309  *
6310  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6311  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6312  *
6313  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6314  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6315  *
6316  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6317  * this TXQ internally.
6318  */
6319 static inline void
6320 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6321 {
6322 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6323 }
6324 
6325 /**
6326  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6327  *
6328  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6329  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6330  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6331  *
6332  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6333  * internally.
6334  */
6335 static inline void
6336 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6337 		     bool force)
6338 {
6339 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6340 }
6341 
6342 /**
6343  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6344  *
6345  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6346  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6347  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6348  * next_txq().
6349  *
6350  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6351  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6352  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6353  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6354  * again.
6355  *
6356  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6357  * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6358  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6359  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6360  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6361  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6362  *
6363  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6364  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6365  */
6366 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6367 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6368 
6369 /**
6370  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6371  *
6372  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6373  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6374  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6375  *
6376  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6377  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6378  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6379  */
6380 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6381 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6382 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6383 
6384 /**
6385  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6386  *
6387  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6388  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6389  *
6390  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6391  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6392  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6393  * @gfp: allocation flags
6394  */
6395 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6396 				   u8 inst_id,
6397 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6398 				   gfp_t gfp);
6399 
6400 /**
6401  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6402  *
6403  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6404  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6405  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6406  *
6407  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6408  * @match: match event information
6409  * @gfp: allocation flags
6410  */
6411 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6412 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6413 			      gfp_t gfp);
6414 
6415 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6416